Samsung | NX10 | Samsung NX10 (18-55 mm) الدليل السريع

‫ﺍﯾﻦ »ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ« ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ »ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ« ﻭ »ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ« ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﻤﻦ ﻭ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪PER‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪*.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ— ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﯿﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ— ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ— ﻧﮑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﯾﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﯾﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﯿﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﲤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺮﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﯿﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻌﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﯿﺖ ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﺳﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﺑﯿﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ )ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ 3/‬ﻓﻮﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺣﯿﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﯿﻨﺪﺍﺯﯾﺪ‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﯿﺖ ﺟﺪی ﻭ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﯿﻨﺪﺍﺯﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﱳ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﭘﯿﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﺎﯾﻞ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﯾﮑﺮﻭﻭﯾﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﺖ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﯿﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﯿﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺜﯿﻒ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺗﻬﻮﯾﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﭙﻮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻦ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺧﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺟﺪی ﻧﺒﯿﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﯿﭻ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﲢﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﳕﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ 32/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﯾﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‪ 104/‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﯾﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎی‬
‫ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﯿﻦ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﯾﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﺜﯿﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﲤﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻢ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﯿﻨﺪﺍﺯﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻨﮕﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﯾﯿﺪ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﺎﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﯿﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫• ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﯿﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﯿﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﲤﯿﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﭘﺮﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﲤﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﯿﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﯿﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﯾﺲ ﻏﯿﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﲢﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﳕﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﯾﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﯿﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﮔﺮﻡ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ ﻇﺮﯾﻒ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﯿﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺒﺨﯿﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﱳ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﯿﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺘﯽ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﳕﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ "‪High – Definition‬‬
‫‪ ،"Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی ﯾﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ HDMI Licencing LLC‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ‪،Open Source‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ”‪ “OpenSourceInfo.pdf‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪) Smart Auto‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‬
‫‪) Program‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ(‬
‫‪) Aperture Priority‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ(‬
‫‪Shutter Speed Priority‬‬
‫)ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ(‬
‫‪) Manual‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ(‬
‫‪) Night‬ﺷﺐ(‬
‫‪) Portrait‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ(‬
‫‪) Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ(‬
‫‪) Scene‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ(‬
‫‪) Movie‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺮ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﭘﯿﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﳑﮑﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻨﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ(‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺗﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﮐﺎﺳﱳ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫‪0S‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫]‪[S‬‬
‫‪AF MF‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫]‪[X‬‬
‫] ‪[W‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﺷﺐ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﭼﻬﺮﻩ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ(‪،‬‬
‫)ﺻﺤﻨﻪ( ﯾﺎ‬
‫)ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫]‪[T‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ 'ﭘﺨﺶ'‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﳕﺎﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫• ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [X‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﯾﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﯿﺮ ﺍﯾﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪3)3‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪2)2‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪( 1)1‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪( 3)3‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1)1‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ )‪1‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪( 2)2‬‬
‫(‬
‫] [‬
‫) (‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪( 1)1‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪( 3)3‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪( 2)2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪.‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪1‬‬
‫( ← ‪Quality‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪1‬‬
‫)ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ(‬
‫‪ 4‬ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫←‬
‫*‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪] :‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ )ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﯾﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪← ( 1) 1‬‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪1‬‬
‫)‪ ،( 1‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪) Quality‬ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪) AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪) BKT‬ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی(‬
‫‪) DPOF‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪) EV‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ(‬
‫‪) OIS‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﯿﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی(‬
‫‪) ISO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺗﯿﻮ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ(‬
‫‪) WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪] Shutter‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪] Shutter‬ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺗﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ )ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫• ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ :‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﯿﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﭘﯿﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫• ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‪ :‬ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‪10 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ‪11 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﻮﭘﺘﺮ‪/‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‪/‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‪13 ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻨﺰ‪14 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪15 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪15 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪16 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪17 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪18 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪19 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪20 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪22 ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻮ‪24 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‪24 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪[Fn‬ﺭ‪25 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‪26 ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‪26 ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪26 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ‪27 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪28 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ‪29 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﱳ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ‪29 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪29 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪29 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪30 .........................................................‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪32 ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪/‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪32 ............................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﯿﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی )‪(OIS‬ﺭ‪33 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ OIS‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪33 ......................................................‬‬
‫‪) Depth preview‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ(ﺭ‪34 .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪35 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪36 ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪37 ......‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪37 .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪37 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪38 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪38 .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪39 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪/‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪40 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪40 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪40 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪40 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪41 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ ‪42 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪43 ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‪45 .......‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻭ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ‪46 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪46 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪47 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻓﻠﯿﻢ ‪47 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‪48 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ‪48 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ‪49 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻼﺵ ‪49 ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪49 ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪50 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ‪51 .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ‪ISO‬ﺭ‪51 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪52 ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪53 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪53 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ‪54 ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪55 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪56 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪57 .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ‪57 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪58 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪59 ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ(ﺭ‪59 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ‪60 .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪61 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‪61 ................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ‪/‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﻋﮑﺲ‪63 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪63 ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪64 ........‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(ﻩ ‪66 .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﲤﺎﺷﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪66 ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪68 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ‪68 .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪69 .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪69 ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪70 ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﲤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ‪71 ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪73 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪Windows‬ﻥ‪73 .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung Master‬ﻥ‪76 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻩ‪77 .......................................‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬ﻩ‪78 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ‪79 .............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪80 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪) Sound‬ﺻﺪﺍ(ﺩ‪81 ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ‪81 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪1‬ﻥ‪82 ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪2‬ﻥ ‪83 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪3‬ﻥ ‪84 .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‪86 .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪87 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪91 .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﺰ‪97 ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪98 ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﺎﻻی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ )ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪CD‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻕ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻻﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ”ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ )ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی(“ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(123‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی )‬
‫( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺩﯾﻮﭘﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻌﺒﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫* ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺭ ‪/AF‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺳﻮﺍﺭﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﮔﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪DC-IN‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪/USB‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫* ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺳﺒﺰ ] [ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ /‬ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ /‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ‪) Color Temp /‬ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ‪ /‬ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ‪ EV /‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ /‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ AF‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ )ﻣﺮﮐﺰ( ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪AEL‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪EV‬‬
‫* ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪DISP‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ )‪(Fn‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ‪Picture wizard/‬‬
‫)ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ(‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫* ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﯾﺎ ﭼﯿﺰﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﻮﭘﺘﺮ‪/‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‪/‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﯿﻨﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﻮﭘﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﯿﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﯾﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﯾﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﯿﮏ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﭼﺸﻤﯽ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی )‬
‫( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﯽ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫]‪[SAMSUNG 30mm F2‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪AF/MF‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪OIS‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫]‪[SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 OIS‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 OIS‬ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﯿﺎﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪INSERT‬‬
‫ﺳﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪CHARGE‬‬
‫‪INSERT‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫‪INSERT‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﯿﮑﺎﻥ ﮐﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﯿﺎﻭﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ SAMSUNG .‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺟﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﭘﯿﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﯿﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﺑﯿﻨﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻠﺰی ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﺥ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﱳ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻌﯿﻮﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﺭﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻔﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯿﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯی ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺖ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﯿﺪﮔﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﯽ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﯾﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻋﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﯿﺎﳒﺎﻣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﳌﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﯾﺎ ﺫﺭﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) ON/OFF‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺨﺴﺘﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Date & Time‬‬
‫‪2010 1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) Language‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [T‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﳋﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S/T/W/X‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Date & Time‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪00 : 00‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2010 1 1‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪00 : 00‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S/T‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪) Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S/T/W/X‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Date & Time‬‬
‫‪2010 1 1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪00 : 00‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [T‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪) Time Zone‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ(‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [W/X‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪01:10 AM‬‬
‫‪2010/01/01‬‬
‫‪ 11‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﯿﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪London‬‬
‫]‪[GMT +00:00‬‬
‫‪MENU Back‬‬
‫‪DST‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪.[S‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪[S] .‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [T‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪) Time‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[S/T/W/X‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ] [ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Date & Time‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2010 1 1‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪00 : 00‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪﻫﺎی ‪ OIS‬ﻭ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ A‬ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪2010.01.01‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3 AEL‬‬
‫‪AFL‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪F3.5‬‬
‫‪15 F3.5‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫‪12:00AM 2010.01.01‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺳﻨﺞ ﻣﺤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ B‬ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی)ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ(‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی)ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪) Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫‪Focus area‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ(‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺳﻨﺠﯽ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪Voice recording‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ ،[MENU‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪ [S/T‬ﯾﺎ ] [ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [MENU] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ]‪[S/T/W/X‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ] [ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،AF/MF‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ )‪(S‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪،OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪AF MF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ )‪(X‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﯿﺮی‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫)‪(W‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ [MENU] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭیﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪S‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ S‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻨﻮ )‪(T‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯾﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪[Fn‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ OIS‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی]‪ [W/X‬ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ P‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪) Flash‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ]‪ [W/X‬ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fill in‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪+1‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪-1‬‬
‫‪-2‬‬
‫‪Flash‬‬
‫‪+1‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪-1‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [W/X‬ﯾﺎ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﺎﻣﻮﺯﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﺎﻥ ﳕﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [DISP‬ﺭﺍ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪DISP‬‬
‫‪2010.01.01‬‬
‫‪09:45‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ [MENU] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ‪) User setup‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ( )‪User Display ← ( 1‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪09:45‬‬
‫‪5 2010.01.01‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪DISP‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪AF - MF‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪20 F3.7‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫• ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺸﺒﮏ ﻭ ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫• ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪.‬‬
‫• ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪.‬‬
‫• ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ‪ ،RGB‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫• ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻞ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﯾﻊ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﯿﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﯾﺎﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫▲ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻧﺎﮐﺎﻓﯽ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪20 F3.7‬‬
‫▲ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫▲ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪) Display Select ← ( 3) 3‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ(‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Auto Select‬‬
‫‪Display Select‬‬
‫‪Main Display NTSC‬‬
‫‪Video Out‬‬
‫‪EVF‬‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪HDMI Size‬‬
‫‪Firmware Update‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Auto Select‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪Main Display‬‬
‫)ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ(‬
‫‪EVF‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ (‬
‫‪MENU Back‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﲔ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪SMART‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪WHITE‬‬
‫‪SMART‬‬
‫● ﺳﺒﺰ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪WHITE‬‬
‫‪SMART‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (29‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﱳ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﻃﻤﯿﻨﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬
‫ﮔﯿﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﯿﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی )‪ (OIS‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(33‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺒﺰﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪125 F3.5‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻄﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﺩی ﻟﺒﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﺮﻧﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮی ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺧﻄﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﮐﺮﻩ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﳕﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﯾﻮﺍﺭ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﯾﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺘﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﯿﭽﮑﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﱳ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﯾﺘﺎﻥ ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[AEL‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [AEL‬ﺭﺍ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(77‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪ (MF‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺗﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(56‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ]‪ ،[AF/MF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ AF/MF‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪ (MF‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪) AF Area‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ (AF‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﳕﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪/‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪AF/MF‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﯾﺘﮏﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ MF‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ )ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﻮﯾﯽ( ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ )ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﻋﺮﯾﺾ( ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻧﯿﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﯾﺪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﳒﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬
‫ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﯿﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی )‪(OIS‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ )‪ ،(OIS‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﯿﺪﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ OIS‬ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﻨﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [OIS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪) ON‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪Mode 1‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(1‬‬
‫‪Mode 2‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪(2‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ OIS‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ،OIS‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺩﺭﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪OIS ← ( 3/ 3) 3‬‬
‫)ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺍﭘﺘﯿﮑﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺩﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک‬‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺑﺮﻭﺯﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻄﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ‬‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬‫ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪OIS‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﳒﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ OIS‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ]‪[OIS‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ ON‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻟﻨﺰ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪) Depth preview‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ(‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ )ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ (f-‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) Key Mapping‬ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ( ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪).‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(77‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺧﺎﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ‪-‬ﻋﺮﯾﺾ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﯾﺾ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭﺳﯿﻊ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‪ f 11 ،‬ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪f 2.8‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭی ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺒﺘﺪی ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﳕﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SMART‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ ﺟﻨﮕﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮگ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﲢﺮک ﺑﺎﻻﯾﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫‪WHITE‬‬
‫‪SMART‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺷﺐ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﳕﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﳕﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎی ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﲢﺮک ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻣﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ P‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(50‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪15 F3.5‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﳑﮑﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮی ﺗﻨﻄﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ )ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺴﱳ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ )ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ A‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪20 F3.5‬‬
‫‪F4‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(50‬‬
‫▲ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﯾﮏ(‬
‫▲ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ )ﺑﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﯾﺾ(‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺒﺎی ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﲢﺮک ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ S‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14M‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪RGB‬‬
‫‪OIS‬‬
‫‪0001‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪250 F3.7‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(50‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫▲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫▲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫‪I‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ‪ M‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯿﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺮﻭﺷﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ »ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی« ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(50‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) S‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ( ﯾﺎ ‪) A‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ(‪ ،‬ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :P‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :S‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :A‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) M‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪/‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯿﺪﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﯾﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﳒﺎ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﯾﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ "ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺯﯾﺒﺎ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Beauty Shot‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪MENU Back‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﯾﺐ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺒﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪) SCENE ← ( 1) 1‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ(‬
‫← ‪) Beauty Shot‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪3‬‬
‫)ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫( ← ‪Face Tone‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Level 1‬‬
‫‪Face Tone‬‬
‫‪Level 1‬‬
‫‪Face Retouch‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Level 2‬‬
‫‪Level 3‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Level 1‬‬
‫‪Face Tone‬‬
‫‪Level 2‬‬
‫‪Face Retouch‬‬
‫‪Level 3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ AF‬ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪Face ← ( 3) 3‬‬
‫‪) Retouch‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ (1280x720‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ )‪ H.264 (MPEG-4.AVC‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪1‬‬
‫)ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ← ‪Quality‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﻣﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺧﯿﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪3‬‬
‫( ← ‪) Voice‬ﺻﺪﺍ(‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﯾﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ 30) fps 30‬ﻓﺮﯾﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ( ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ AF‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﯿﺰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻟﻨﺰ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪01:00‬‬
‫‪01:00‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪00:01‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫‪F3.5‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫)‪ H.264 (MPEG-4 part10/AVC‬ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2003‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﮑﺎﺭی‬
‫‪ ISO-IEC‬ﻭ ‪ TU-T‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﳒﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﻻﯾﯽ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﯾﺖ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺳﺎﺯﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﯿﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﺁﯾﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﺮﺁﯾﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﻧﻈﯿﺮ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ‪ ،‬ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ AF‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی )‬
‫( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻻﻣﭗ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ*‪) Aperture Priority ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ((‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﯾﺞ ﺗﺎﺭﺗﺮ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻢ ﮐﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫)‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(*‪) In ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ(‪) Out ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ(‪) In-Out ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‪-‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ((‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺑﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺑﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﭘﯿﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺪی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫)‪) OFF‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(*‪) On ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ((‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻭ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫‪ 3872 x 2176‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ )‪A3 (16:9‬‬
‫)‪(16:9‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﲤﺎﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺳﻮژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﯾﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3008 x 1688‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ )‪A4 (16:9‬‬
‫)‪(16:9‬‬
‫‪ 1920 x 1080‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ )‪A5 (16:9‬‬
‫)‪(16:9‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Photo Size ← ( 1) 1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫)ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ(‬
‫‪4592 x 3056‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪A1‬‬
‫‪:14M‬‬
‫)‪(3:2‬‬
‫‪3872 x 2592‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪A2‬‬
‫‪:10M‬‬
‫)‪(3:2‬‬
‫‪3008 x 2000‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪A3‬‬
‫‪:6M‬‬
‫)‪(3:2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫‪:2M‬‬
‫‪1920 x 1280‬‬
‫)‪(3:2‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪A5‬‬
‫‪ 4592 x 2584‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ )‪A1 (16:9‬‬
‫)‪(16:9‬‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Movie Size ← ( 1) 1‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1280‬‬
‫)‪(16:9‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫‪640‬‬
‫‪640‬‬
‫)‪(4:3‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫‪320‬‬
‫‪320‬‬
‫)‪(4:3‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻭ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﯾﺎ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﱳ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Quality ← ( 1) 1‬‬
‫)ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SF‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪S.FINE‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪FINE‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪NORMAL‬‬
‫‪Super Fine‬‬
‫)ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ(‬
‫‪) Fine‬ﺧﻮﺏ(‬
‫‪) Normal‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪S.Fine+RAW‬‬
‫)ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‪(RAW+‬‬
‫‪Fine+RAW‬‬
‫)ﺧﻮﺏ‪(RAW+‬‬
‫‪Normal+RAW‬‬
‫)ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪(RAW+‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﱳ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪14M(4592‬‬
‫)‪ x 3056‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ Raw‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﯿﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﳕﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ Raw‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ JPEG‬ﯾﺎ ‪ TIFF‬ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﯾﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ‪AMSUNG‬‬
‫‪ RAW Converter‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺴﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﯿﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ ،Raw‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ”‪ “SRW‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫”‪(“SAM_9999.SRW‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻓﻠﯿﻢ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Quality ← ( 1) 1‬‬
‫)ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Normal‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) HQ‬ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪2‬‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪2‬‬
‫( ← ‪Drive‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﯿﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﯾﺎ‬
‫]‪ [W/X‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ‪ 30 ~ 2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Timer‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪[Shutter‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻌﺒﯿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﯿﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﯿﺎﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻼ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ 'ﻓﻼﺵ' ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪) Flash ← ( 2) 2‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SMART‬‬
‫‪Auto+Red‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪+‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ(‬
‫‪Fill in‬‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ(‬
‫‪Fill-in Red‬‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪+‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﭘﯿﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﳑﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻤﯿﺸﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﳑﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺰﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‬
‫‪Smart Flash‬‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫‪2nd Curtain‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺰﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫)ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ(‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ "ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪ Guide No‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ(‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺤﺼﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ‪ ،NX‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪) Auto+Red‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪+‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ( ﯾﺎ ‪Fill-in Red‬‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭی ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻃﯽ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪) 1st Curtain‬ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ( ﻭ ‪2nd Curtain‬‬
‫)ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ( ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪1st‬‬
‫‪) Curtain‬ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ( ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﳒﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) 2nd Curtain‬ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ( ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺮﺗﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻠﯽ )‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﳒﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﮐﻨﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪← ISO ← ( 1) 1‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺗﻮپ‬
‫‪ S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪1st‬‬
‫‪) Curtain‬ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺗﻮپ‬
‫‪ S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪2nd‬‬
‫‪) Curtain‬ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ(‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﯾﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ‪ ISO‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(53‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪2‬‬
‫( ← ‪) Flash‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪2‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫]‪ [W/X‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪Flash Exposure Value‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫‪+1‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪-1‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪-2‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﯾﺎ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺛﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﮐﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻟﯿﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪2‬‬
‫)‪2‬‬
‫‪2/‬‬
‫(←‬
‫‪)AF Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ← (AF‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ Single AF‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫)‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Continuous‬‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫)‪ AF‬ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯿﮑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪Focus‬‬
‫)ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ]‪ ،[AF/MF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ AF/MF‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫)‪ (MF‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،AF‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(30‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ AF‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫[ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﳑﮑﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪AF Area ← ( 2) 2‬‬
‫)ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪ ← (AF‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Selection‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪(AF‬‬
‫‪AF Multi‬‬
‫)‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫‪Face‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫‪Detection AF‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫‪Self-Portrait AF‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪MF‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪ AF‬ﺭﺍ ﳕﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ AF) Multi AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪ AF‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ‬
‫ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S/T/W/X‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪← ( 2) 2‬‬
‫‪) AF Area‬ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪Selection AF ← (AF‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ (AF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎی ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪AF Mode‬‬
‫‪Selection AF‬‬
‫‪AF Area‬‬
‫‪Multi AF‬‬
‫‪AF Priority‬‬
‫‪Face Detection AF‬‬
‫‪MF Assist‬‬
‫‪Self-Portrait AF‬‬
‫‪Drive‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪AF Zoom‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Flash‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪AF Zoom‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﯿﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ )‪ (MF‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪) MF Assist ← ( 2) 2‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ( ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪AF Mode‬‬
‫‪AF Area‬‬
‫‪AF Priority‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪MF Assist‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Drive‬‬
‫‪Flash‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Back‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﺴﺎﯾﺮ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﳕﺎﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪← ( 2) 2‬‬
‫‪) ← AF Area‬ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪Face Detection AF (AF‬‬
‫)ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪ (AF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﯿﻞ‬‫ﻋﯿﻨﮏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﻮﺷﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﯾﮑﺪﺳﺖ‬‫ﻭ ﯾﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪) Picture Wizard‬ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ(‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﻈﯿﺮ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ AF‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﳕﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮑﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﺮﯾﻌﺘﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪Face Detection‬‬
‫‪) AF‬ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ ،(AF‬ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮕﯽ ﺷﻨﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪2‬‬
‫← )ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪(AF‬‬
‫‪) Self-portrait AF‬ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ‪ (AF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪2‬‬
‫( ← ‪AF Area‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻨﯿﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﯾﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ )ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ( ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ(‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺗﯿﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﮐﺎﺳﱳ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫‪0 S‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩ ﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﱳ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﺷﺎﺗﺮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﯿﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻤﯿﻢ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪AE‬‬
‫‪) BKT‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ‪/‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﳊﺎﻅ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ‪ 3‬ﻋﮑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﻭ ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮑﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(73‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩ ”‪ “±3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‬‫‪3‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫)ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫)ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮑﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺗﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺛﯿﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﯿﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺎﺛﯿﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺭﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪White ← ( 1/ 1) 1‬‬
‫‪) Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Auto WB‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی(‬
‫‪) Daylight‬ﺭﻭﺯ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯی ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪) Cloudy‬ﺍﺑﺮی( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﺍﺑﺮی‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﯾﮋﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫‪White‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪4200K‬‬
‫)ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺳﻔﯿﺪ(‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫‪NW‬‬
‫)ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ‪(NW‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫‪Daylight‬‬
‫)ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ(‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﮕﺴﱳ(‬
‫‪Flash WB‬‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(WB‬‬
‫‪Custom Set‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ(‬
‫‪Color Temp‬‬
‫)ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ(‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﯾﮋﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪5,000K‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﯾﮋﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪6,500K‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ ﻭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [WB‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍی ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﯾﺎ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺮﮐﺎﺕ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ‬
‫‪) Single‬ﺗﮑﯽ(‬
‫‪Continuous‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ(‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Drive ← ( 2) 2‬‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Burst‬ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ(‬
‫‪) Timer‬ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪AE BKT‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪WB BKT‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﱳ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ‪ 3‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﳑﮑﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ 30 ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ 2~30‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮑﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮑﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮی ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Picture wizard‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪BKT‬‬
‫)ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ (BKT‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ WB BKT‬ﻭ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ BKT‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫)‪، WB BKT‬‬
‫‪) Picture wizard BKT‬ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪ ((BKT‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Burst‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪1472x976‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﺎﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪Burst‬‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ(‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ‬
‫ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Burst‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ(‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﯿﺰﳕﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪) Burst‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ(‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪) Burst‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ 30/1‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﯾﻌﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫• ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Burst Shooting‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ(‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Burst shooting‬ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ( ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ‪/‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﺎﻃﻔﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Picture ← ( 1) 1‬‬
‫‪) Wizard‬ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ( ← ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Vivid‬‬
‫‪Color‬‬
‫■‬
‫‪Saturation‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪Cool‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Sharpness‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Contrast‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ]‪[S/T/W/X‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯿﺘﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی )‬
‫( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ ISO NR) High ISO NR‬ﺑﺎﻻ(‪ Long Term NR) NR ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻣﺪﺕ((‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ‪ A-TTL‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ 20A‬ﯾﺎ ‪42A‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) On ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(*(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭗ ‪ AF‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) On ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(*(‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫* ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ )ﺩﺭﺟﻪ( ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪(2/1 ,*3/1) .‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ*(‬
‫ﮔﯿﺮی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(sRGB*, Adobe RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﱳ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻪ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﯾﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﻭﺯﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽ ﳕﺎﯾﺪ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ*‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﻭ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) AE BKT Set‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ‪) WB BKT Set ،(AE BKT‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ‪P ،(WB BKT‬‬
‫‪) Wiz BKT Set‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ‪((P Wiz BKT‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺖ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﲤﺎﺷﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﳕﺎﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [W/X‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺷﯿﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [DISP‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫‪18mm‬‬
‫‪AWB‬‬
‫‪0.0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4592 X 3056‬‬
‫‪2010.01.01‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Metering‬‬
‫‪Flash‬‬
‫‪Focal Length‬‬
‫‪White balance‬‬
‫‪EVC‬‬
‫‪Picture wizard‬‬
‫‪Picture size‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪100 00004/00009‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪F5.1‬‬
‫‪7 8‬‬
‫‪1/250‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻞ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪18mm‬‬
‫‪2010.01.01‬‬
‫‪Video size 1280 X 720‬‬
‫‪Date 2010.01.01‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪100 00004/00009‬‬
‫‪4592 X 3056‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬
‫‪F3.5‬‬
‫‪0.0‬‬
‫‪1/40‬‬
‫‪01:00‬‬
‫‪Capture‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﳕﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ ‪RGB‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‪ ،ISO ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻞ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ‪ /‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪00:00‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺗﺎﺧﯿﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﲟﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﯿﺎﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﻈﯿﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ )ﺭﻭﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ‬
‫)ﻫﻔﺘﻪ( ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Type‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Week‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪2010. 1. 1‬‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ(‬
‫‪) Week‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ(‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪MENU Filter‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﯾﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ]‪ [W/X‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﳒﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﯿﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺍﺷﱳ ﳕﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ 9‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﳕﺎی ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ 20‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻓﺮﺁﯾﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ(‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪2010. 1. 1‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪MENU Filter‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [AEL‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻓﺮﺁﯾﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [AEL‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻤﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ] [ ← ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ← ‪) All‬ﻫﻤﻪ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) Multiple Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫)ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪x1.7‬‬
‫‪Trim‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪Fn‬‬
‫‪Full Image‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S/T/W/X‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻥ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [Fn‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ )ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪] ← [MENU‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻪ ﲤﺎﺷﺎی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) All‬ﻫﻤﮕﯽ( ‪ :‬ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Images‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ( • ‪) Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ(‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﯽ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ‬
‫ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Select‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ(‪ :‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Effect‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﮑﺖ( • ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Interval‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺳﯿﻘﯽ(‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﲤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ ‪) Slide Show‬ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ( ← ‪) Play‬ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﮑﺮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) repeat‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺷﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪100-0001‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [W/X‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪01:00‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪00:04‬‬
‫‪Pause‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [W‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [X‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪/‬ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﯿﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [S‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‪ [T‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ← ] [ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻥ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ← ] [ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻥ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ‪) Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮﯾﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﯿﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻧﯿﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﭘﯽ ﯾﻮ‬
‫)‪(CPU‬‬
‫‪ Pentium III 500‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫)‪ Pentium III 800‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺭﻡ )‪ 256 (RAM‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪ 512‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Windows 2000 / XP / Vista‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ‪ 250‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﮔﯿﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﯾﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ‪ 1024x768‬ﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ‪ 24‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪ Microsoft Direct X 9.0c‬ﯾﺎ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﯿﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪QuickTime Player 7.6‬‬
‫• ‪ IIntel Pentium 4، 3.2‬ﮔﯿﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪/‬‬
‫‪ 2.6 GHz ,AMD Athlon™ 64FX‬ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ Windows XP service pack2‬ﯾﺎ ‪Vista‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 512‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ﺭﻡ )‪ 1) (RAM‬ﮔﯿﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫• ‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ /‬ﺳﺮی ‪ATI‬‬
‫‪ X1600‬ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﳕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ 64‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ Windows XP‬ﻭ ‪ Vista‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪Master‬‬
‫‪QuickTime‬‬
‫‪Player 7.6‬‬
‫‪Samsung RAW‬‬
‫‪Converter‬‬
‫‪Adobe Reader‬‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی )‪ (H.264 (MPEG-4.AVC‬ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ RAW‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﯾﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ Samsung Digital Camera Installer‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺩﺭﺍﯾﻮ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﱳ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﯿﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﯿﺘﯽ ﳕﯽ ﭘﺬﯾﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﮑﻤﯿﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ← My Computer‬ﻣﺴﯿﺮ‬
‫‪",XXXPHOTO" ← DCIM ← Removable Disk‬‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ "‪ "XXX_MMDD‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ "‪ "XXX_MMDD‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ‪ 1‬ژﺍﻧﻮﯾﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ "‪ "0101_101‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ )ﺑﺮﺍی ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ Windows 2000/Vista‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪) Help‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫➌ ➋‬
‫➍‬
‫➊‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ))‪H.264‬‬
‫‪ ((MPEG4.AVC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung Master‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫➐‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫➊‬
‫➋‬
‫➌‬
‫➌‬
‫➍‬
‫➎‬
‫➋‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫➊‬
‫➋‬
‫➌‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺟﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ؛ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭگ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫➊‬
‫➏‬
‫➐‬
‫➏‬
‫➎‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ؛ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎی ﲤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﯾﺎ‬
‫‪ TIFF‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ RAW‬ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪ Windows XP‬ﻭ ‪ Vista‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ]‪All Programs ← Start‬‬
‫← ‪Samsung RAW ← Samsung RAW Converter‬‬
‫‪ [Converter‬ﮐﻠﯿﮏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪RAW‬‬
‫①‬
‫②‬
‫③‬
‫④‬
‫⑤‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Ì‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ[‪:‬‬
‫]ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی[‪:‬‬
‫]‪) Color‬ﺭﻧﮓ([‪:‬‬
‫]ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﯾﻪ[‪:‬‬
‫]ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ /‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ[‪:‬‬
‫]ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ[‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﯾﻼﯾﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﯾﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﯾﻼﯾﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻫﺎﯾﻼﯾﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﯿﺴﺘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻻﯾﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﯿﺶ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ]ﮐﻤﮏ[ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung Converter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ‪ Samsung‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪One Photo‬‬
‫‪Images‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Size‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Layout‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Type‬‬
‫‪Quality‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ [W/X] ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Print‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺁﯾﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪) Images‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ(‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Layout‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی( ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Quality‬ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ(‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ(‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) File Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ( ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Reset‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ( ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی )‬
‫( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫)ﻋﮑﺲ‪/‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ(‬
‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫‪Highlight‬‬
‫)ﻫﺎﯾﻼﯾﺖ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺎﺛﯿﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺎﻃﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﭼﺎپ‬
‫)‪ < (DPOF‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ‬
‫)‪(HDTV‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪HDTV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﺎپ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﲤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ‪ Setup Menu‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1sec‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Quickview‬‬
‫‪Display Adjust‬‬
‫‪3min‬‬
‫‪Display Save‬‬
‫‪1min‬‬
‫‪Power Save‬‬
‫‪Date&Time‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Medium‬‬
‫‪System Volume‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪AF Sound‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Button Sound‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪MENU Exit‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫‪System volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ(‬
‫‪AF Sound‬‬
‫)ﺻﺪﺍی ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪Operating‬‬
‫)ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫‪) Language‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ(‬
‫‪Display Adjust‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ(‬
‫‪Display Save‬‬
‫)ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ(‬
‫‪Quickview‬‬
‫)ﳕﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) Low ،‬ﮐﻢ(‪) Medium ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(*‪) High ،‬ﺯﯾﺎﺩ((‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،AF‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) OFF) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) On ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(*(‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪) OFF) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) On ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(*(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺒﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Display Brightness‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ(‪ :‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ]‪ [T/S‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Auto Brightness‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ(‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬
‫‪) Display Color‬ﺭﻧﮓ(‪ :‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ]‪ [S/T/W/X‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) 0.5min ،‬ﻧﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(*‪ 1) 1min ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(‪ 3) 3min ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(‪ 5) 5min ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(‪10min ،‬‬
‫)‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ((‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﳕﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ )ﲤﺎﺷﺎی ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪ 1) 1sec ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ(*‪ 3) 3min ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ(‪ 5) 5min ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ(‪) Hold ،‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﱳ((‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪1)1‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Yes‬ﺑﻠﻪ(‪) No ،‬ﺧﯿﺮ(*(‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫)ﺗﺨﻠﯿﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ(‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) Yes) (.‬ﺑﻠﻪ(‪) No ،‬ﺧﯿﺮ(*(‬
‫‪File Name‬‬
‫)ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(* ‪SAM_XXXX.JPG(sRGB)/_SAMXXXX.JPG(Adobe RGB) :‬‬
‫‪MMDDXXXX.JPG(sRGB)/_MDDXXXX.JPG(Adobe RGB, Jan. ~ Sep.)/‬‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ( ‪:‬‬
‫)‪_ADDXXXX.JPG (Adobe RGB, indicating A for Oct, B for Nov, C for Dec‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Jan 01 sRGB‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ "‪ "0101xxxx.jpg‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪File Number‬‬
‫)ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪) Series) .‬ﺳﺮی ﻫﺎ(*‪) Reset ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ((‬
‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺎی ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ 100PHOTO ،‬ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻧﯿﺰ‬
‫‪) SAM_1001‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ sRGB‬ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﯾﮑﯽ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ SAM_0001‬ﺗﺎ ‪ SAM_9999‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﯾﮑﯽ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ 100PHOTO‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 999PHOTO‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ 999 ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ( ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Folder Type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(* ‪XXXPHOTO :‬‬
‫‪) Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ( ‪XXX_MMDD :‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪2)2‬‬
‫‪Power Save‬‬
‫)ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژی(‬
‫‪Date & Time‬‬
‫)ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ‬
‫*ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻌﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) 0.5min‬ﻧﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(*‪ 1) 1min ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(*‪ 3) 3min ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(‪ 5) 5min ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(‪ 10) 10min ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ‪30min ،‬‬
‫)‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ((‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﯿﺰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﯾﺎ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﯾﮏ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ(‪) Date ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ(‪) Time Zone ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ(‪) Time ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(‪) Imprint ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﱳ((‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭼﺎپ ﯾﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﺎپ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ‪3)3‬‬
‫(‬
‫* ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﭘﯿﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Display Select‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ(‬
‫‪) Auto Select‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(*‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﲔ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪) Main Display‬ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ(‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) EVF‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ(‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Sensor Cleaning‬‬
‫)ﲤﯿﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ(‬
‫‪) Sensor Cleaning‬ﲤﯿﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ :Start Up Action‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﲤﯿﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪On) .‬‬
‫)ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‪) OFF ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(*(‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﳒﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺛﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺴﱳ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Video Out‬‬
‫)ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮ(‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﯾﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺳﯿﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : *NTSC‬ﺍﯾﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﯾﮑﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ژﺍﭘﻦ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﯾﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﮑﺰﯾﮏ ﻭ ﻏﯿﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) PAL‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ BDGHI‬ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ( ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﯿﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﯾﺶ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮋﯾﮏ‪ ،‬ﭼﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﳌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﺘﺎﻟﯿﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐﻮﯾﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻟﺰی‪ ،‬ﻧﯿﻮﺯﯾﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮕﺎﭘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﯿﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺋﯿﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﯾﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻭژ ﻭ ﻏﯿﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪+Anynet‬‬
‫)‪(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ )ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(90‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(*‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﳕﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫‪HDMI Size‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪) Auto : NTSC‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ(*‪(1080i, 720p, 480p ،‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪) Auto : PAL‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ(*‪(1080i, 720p, 576p ،‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻨﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Body Firmware‬ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ(‪ :‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Lens Firmware‬ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ(‪ :‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﯾﺖ ‪ www.samsungimaging.com‬ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Firmware Update‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﯿﺴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ(‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﯾﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ )ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎی ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻠﯿﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭﯾﺪﯾﻮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎی ﺯﯾﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﹰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Card Error‬‬
‫)ﺧﻄﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ( • ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﯿﺎﻭﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(82‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Card Locked‬‬
‫)ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫‪ DCF Full Error‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(82‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺁﺳﯿﺐ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‬
‫‪File Error‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺧﻄﺎی ﻓﺎﯾﻞ(‬
‫ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪Low Battery‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﯿﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻏﯿﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪Memory Full‬‬
‫)ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪No Image File‬‬
‫ﺩﻫﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻫﯿﭻ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮی‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ(‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ‬
‫‪ .Check the lens‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﲤﺎﺱ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫‪Error 00‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﯿﺂﻭﺭﯾﺪ ﻭ‬
‫‪Error 01/02‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﯿﺐ ﯾﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﳕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﳕﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﯾﯽ ﻧﯿﺮﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(83‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﳑﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺁﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ )ﺯﯾﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ( ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﱳ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺟﯿﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﯾﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﯾﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺯﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻬﯿﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻏﯿﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(82‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﯿﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪی ﺗﻬﯿﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(112‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﳑﮑﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ AF‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﯿﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍﳒﺎﻡ ﳕﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﮐﺎﺭ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﯿﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﯾﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(49‬‬
‫• ﳕﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﯿﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی ﯾﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﯾﺴﯿﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ‪ ( ) 2‬ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(82‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ )ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﯿﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﲤﯿﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﲤﯿﺰ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﲤﯿﺰ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(111‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﻏﯿﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(60‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﯾﺰﯾﻮﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﳕﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﯾﯽ ﳕﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(59‬‬
‫• ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(37‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(49‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(51‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(59‬‬
‫• ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﯾﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(37‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(49‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪(51‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﻭﺍﯾﺪ( ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ )ﻭﺍﯾﺪ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﯾﻖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﯾﺴﯿﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﲤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯿﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی‬
‫ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ codec‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ QuickTime® Player‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ‪ Codec Pack Full‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪QuickTime® Player 7.6‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ QuickTime® Player 7.6‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ )‪ H.264 (MPEG.AVC‬ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ((‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ QuickTime® Player‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Codec Pack Full‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ Codec Pack Full‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Media Player‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ )‪ Media Player Classic‬ﯾﺎ ‪Windows Media Player‬‬
‫‪ 11‬ﺗﻮﺻﯿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ QuickTime® Player 7.6‬ﯾﺎ ‪ K-Lite Codec Pack Full‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ XP SP2‬ﯾﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﯿﺮی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻭﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪CMOS‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ‪15.6×23.4‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪ 14.6‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻞ ﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪ 15.1‬ﻣﮕﺎﭘﯿﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Samsung NX‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﻗﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎی ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻟﻨﺰ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻨﺰ(‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ ‪Super sonic‬‬
‫‪AMOLED‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪“3.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪ 614k (640x480) VGA‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ‬
‫)‪.(PenTile‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪ 100‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪EVF‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﯿﮏ‬
‫‪ 921k (640x480) VGA‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ﹰ ‪ 100‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪(APS-C, 50mm, 0.86x‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ‬
‫)‪-1m-1‬‬
‫‪ Eyepoint‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 20.2‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﻮﭘﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪2.0m-1+ ~ 4.0-‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ 1 :‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﳋﻮﺍﻩ(‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ 15 ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ؛ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ‪ 35 ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 10‬ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ AF ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪MF،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ )‪ LED‬ﺳﺒﺰ(‬
‫‪AF‬‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﯿﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪ 4000/1:‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪30 ~ .‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ 4000/1:‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪ 30 ~ .‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫))‪ 3EV/1‬ﯾﺎ ‪ 2EV/1‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 8 :‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(‬
‫)‪ TTL 247 (19x13‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﯿﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﮐﺰ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﯿﺮی ‪EV0 ~ 18 :‬‬
‫)‪(ISO100·30mm F2.0‬‬
‫‪ 1/2EV،1/3EV) EV ±3‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪AEL‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AE‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪،800 ،400 ،200 ،100 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ 1) ،3200 ،1600‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪(EV‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﭘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ )‪(AE، WB، PW‬‬
‫‪ 3 : JPEG‬ﻓﺮﯾﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫‪10‬ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ ‪ 30 :‬ﻓﺮﯾﻢ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪ 3 : RAW‬ﻓﺮﯾﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ )‪،(3EV±‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی )‪ 3‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻨﺘﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪ 3‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ 2-30‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪ 1) .‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﯿﻢ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪) SR9NX01 :‬ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی(‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ‪ +‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ‪) 11‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪(ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﻣﯿﺪﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ‪ 28‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ 35‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﺩﯾﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1/180‬ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ 0.5EV) -2 - +2EV‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ(‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫)‪(SEF 42A, SEF 20A‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪Hot Shoe‬‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺮی‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ )‪W،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ،(N، D‬ﺗﻨﮕﺴﱳ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪K ،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻔﯿﺪی‬
‫)ﺩﺳﺘﯽ(‬
‫ﮐﻬﺮﺑﺎﻳﯽ ‪ /‬ﺁﺑﯽ ‪ /‬ﺳﺒﺰ ‪/‬ﺑﻨﻔﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻣﯿﮑﺮﻭ‬
‫)‪±7‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﯿﮏ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫)‪(3-1‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﯾﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫‪ ،AE‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪ ،AE‬ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺷﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻮﺯﺁپ )ﳕﺎی ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ(‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﱳ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻃﻠﻮﻉ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻑ‬
‫)‪:JPEG (3:2‬‬
‫‪ 14‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ‪(4592x3056)،‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ‪(3872x2592)،‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪،(3008x2000‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪،(1920x1280‬‬
‫‪ 1.4‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪:(1472x976‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻟﯽ‬
‫)‪:JPEG (16:9‬‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪،(4592x2584‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪،(3872x2176‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪،(3008x1688‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪(1920x1080‬‬
‫‪14 : RAW‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )‪(4592x3056‬‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪SRW RAW‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ‪sRGB، Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﮐﻠﯿﭗ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﯾﻢ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪MP4 (H.264‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪AAC :‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫))ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 25 :‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ(‬
‫‪1280x720 , 640x480 ,‬‬
‫‪320x240‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻓﺮﯾﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﱳ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺗﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ )ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ‬
‫‪ ، (20/9/3‬ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﯾﻼﯾﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺐ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺭﺗﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﯾﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺒﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻣﻼﯾﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﯾﯿﺰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﮏ‪ ،‬ﮐﻼﺳﯿﮏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی( ‪:‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SD‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4GB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) SDHC‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 8GB‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﯿﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ(‬
‫‪RAW (SRW), JPEG (EXIF‬‬
‫‪,2.21), DCF, DPOF 1.1‬‬
‫‪PictBridge 1.0‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 14‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ‪RAW 35 :‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫‪ 14‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،142‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،278‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪408‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،197‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،382‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪724‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،322‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،615‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪1128‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،738‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،1334‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪2238‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ )‪ 1.4‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ( ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،1201‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،2092‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪3320‬‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )ﻭﺍﯾﺪ(‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،168‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،328‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪630‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﯿﺖ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )ﻭﺍﯾﺪ( ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،234‬‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﮔﯿﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ(‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،454‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪860‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )ﻭﺍﯾﺪ( ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺏ ‪،381‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،727‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪1334‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﯾﺖ )ﻭﺍﯾﺪ( ‪ :‬ﺧﯿﻠﯿﺨﻮﺏ ‪،872‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺏ ‪ ،1573‬ﻋﺎﺩی ‪2638‬‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻢ‪ 15 : 1280x720 :‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪ 22 ،‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی‪.‬‬
‫‪ 44 : 640x480‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 66‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی‪.‬‬
‫‪ 145 : 320x240‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 210‬ﺩﻗﯿﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی‪.‬‬
‫※ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺩﯾﺠﯿﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ‪) NTSC، PAL‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ(‬
‫‪HDMI 1.3: (1080i, 720P,‬‬
‫)‪576P / 480P‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫)‪DC 9.0V, 1.5A (100 ~ 240V‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪BP1310 :‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫)‪(1300mAh‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪BC1310 :‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪AD9NX01 :‬‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی(‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﳑﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫)‪USB 2.0 (HI-SPEED‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﯿﺰﯾﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫× ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ×‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی‬
‫‪39.8×87×123‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ )ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯿﺮﻭﻥ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ(‬
‫‪353‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ(‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪85% ~ 5‬‬
‫‪,Samsung Master‬‬
‫‪Samsung RAW Converter,‬‬
‫‪QuickTime Player 7.6‬‬
‫* ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﲤﺎﻣﯽ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﲡﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﯿﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫‪SAMSUNG 30mm F2‬‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ 46.2‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ 35‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮی(‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺩﺭ ‪ 5‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺩﺭ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪(Aspherical‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪50.2°‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﯾﻪ ﺩﯾﺪ‬
‫)‪ ،F2 (Min. F22‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬
‫‪ ، 7‬ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Samsung NX‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﯿﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺧﯿﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ 0.25‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ ~ ∞‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪0.16X‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻨﺰ‬
‫‪ 43‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﯿﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ x‬ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ 21.5 x 61.5‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪ 85‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ(‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪85% ~ 5‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5‬‬‫‪5.6 OIS‬‬
‫‪ 55 - 18‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ 84.7 - 27.7‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ 35‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮی(‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺩﺭ ‪ 9‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬
‫)‪ 1‬ﻟﻨﺰ ‪(Aspherical‬‬
‫‪28.7° - 75.9°‬‬
‫)‪ ،F3.5 - 5.6 (Min. F22‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ‪ ، 7 :‬ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Samsung NX‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫‪SAMSUNG 50-200mm F4‬‬‫‪5.6 ED OIS‬‬
‫‪ 200 - 50‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ 308 - 77‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ 35‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮی(‬
‫‪ 17‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺩﺭ ‪ 13‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻨﺰ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﻕ(‬
‫‪8.0° - 31.4°‬‬
‫)‪ ،F4 - 5.6 (Min. F22‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ، 7‬ﺩﺭﯾﭽﻪ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪Samsung NX‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ 0.28‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ ~ ∞‬
‫‪ 0.98‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ ~ ∞‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪0.22X‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ 58‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 65.1 x 63‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪ 198‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ(‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪85% ~ 5‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪0.2X‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ 52‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ 100.5 x 70‬ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎ ‪ 417‬ﮔﺮﻡ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ(‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪85% ~ 5‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﳑﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪56‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻧﻬﺎ ‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪24‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی ‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﳊﻈﻪ ﺍی ‪65‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪68‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪85 HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ‪6‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪49‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪57‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪58‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﯿﺪی ‪60‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﯾﻤﺮ ‪61‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪Continuous‬‬
‫)ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ( ‪61‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﯿﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪61‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﮐﺖ ‪58‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪) Backlight‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ( ‪79‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪78‬‬
‫ﲤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ‪78‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪10‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪16‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ‪19‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ‪65‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ‪78‬‬
‫پ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ‪6‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪30‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ‪66‬‬
‫ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻄﺎ ‪86‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ‪27‬‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫چ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ‪12‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﻮی ‪12‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪) AF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪78‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪79‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪79‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ‪60‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪4‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﭼﺸﻢ ‪11‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Smart Auto‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﯿﮏ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ( ‪35‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪36‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪37‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Shutter Priority‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ( ‪38‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪45‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪) Night‬ﺷﺐ( ‪40‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﺮﻩ ‪40‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ‪41‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﯾﺰ ﺑﺎﺩ ‪45‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﯿﺖ ‪51 ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪69‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪20‬‬
‫ﺭﺗﻮﺵ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪79‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪78‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪39 EV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪46‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪20‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ‪31‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪18‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ‪38‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻮ ‪24‬‬
‫ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪53‬‬
‫ﺷﻴﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪61‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪76‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﻮﭘﺘﺮ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪26‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ‪81‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪81‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪81‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ‪81 AF‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ‪81‬‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ‪83‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ‪43‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪11‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ‪34‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪31‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪53‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪53‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ‪64‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ‪65‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪80‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ‪30 AEL‬‬
‫ک‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺘﯽ ‪4‬‬
‫ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ‪47‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ‪51‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪73‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰ ‪14‬‬
‫ﻟﺮﺯﺷﮕﯿﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪32‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﯾﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ ‪37‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪68‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪69‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ‪91‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﺰ ‪97‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﳕﺎﯾﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ‪28‬‬
‫ﳕﺎی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪35‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی ‪65‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ‪70‬‬
‫ﳕﺎﯾﺶ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ‪72‬‬
‫ﳕﺎی ﻓﻮﺭی ‪81‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ‪82‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪82‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ‪45‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﺰﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪63‬‬
‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻋﮑﺲ ‪79‬‬
‫‪… ,A, B, C‬‬
‫‪51 1st Curtain‬‬
‫‪) 2nd curtain‬ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﻭﻡ( ‪51‬‬
‫‪) AE BKT‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ‪/‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ( ‪65‬‬
‫‪) AF Priority‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﯾﺖ‪64 (AF‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪64‬‬
‫‪84 Anynet+‬‬
‫‪) Date&Time‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ(‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫‪25 Fn‬‬
‫‪79 HDTV‬‬
‫‪47 JPEG‬‬
‫‪) Noise reduction‬ﮐﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻮﯾﺰ( ‪64‬‬
‫‪33 OIS‬‬
‫‪61 P Wiz BKT‬‬
‫‪78 PictBridge‬‬
‫‪) Picture style‬ﺳﺒﮏ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی( ‪79‬‬
‫‪73 QuickTime player‬‬
‫‪77 RAW‬‬
‫‪73 Samsung Master‬‬
‫‪Samsung Raw Converter‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫‪) Selection AF‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪(AF‬‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪ AF) Single AF‬ﺗﮑﯽ( ‪53‬‬
‫‪61 WB BKT‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﯾﺎ ﯾﺎﻓﱳ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﯾﯿﺪ ﯾﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﯾﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ‬
‫‪ http://www.samsungimaging.com/‬ﺑﺮﻭﯾﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪AD68-04685A (1.2‬‬
Download PDF